Home

2012 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner`s Manual

1. 36 Windshield Defroster 101 Windshield Washers 205 558 Windshield Wiper Blades 558 Wiper Blade Replacement 558 Wipers Intermittent 205 Zone Control Temperature Control 392 634 INDEX INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna a
2. 347 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using This Feature 347 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 348 Play Mode 348 List Or Browse Mode 350 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA 352 Uconnect Multimedia Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 353 Getting Started 353 Play Video Games 354 Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 357 Dual Video Screen 359 Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio 359 Play A DVD Using The VES Player If Equipped 362 Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing 364 Third Row Swivel Screen If Equipped 367 Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System 368 Remote Control 368 Remote Control Storage 371
3. 99 Transporting Passengers 99 Exhaust Gas 99 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 100 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 103 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON RUN position 1 OFF 2 ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyl
4. 23 Park Sense System Rear 215 Parking Brake 439 Pedals Adjustable 211 Personal Settings 314 Pets Transporting 95 Phone Cellular 125 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 125 Placard Tire and Loading Information 457 Power Door Locks 34 Lift Gate 49 Mirrors 114 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 244 Seats 160 Sliding Door 42 Steering 437 438 Sunroof 241 Windows 36 Power Steering Fluid 588 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 69 Preparation for Jacking 521 Pretensioners Seat Belts 64 Progr
5. 314 4 Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped 320 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 320 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped 320 Media Center 130 Sales Code RES 321 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 321 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 324 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 326 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 329 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 330 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 330 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 336 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 338 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 341 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 341 Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped 342 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped 346 iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 346 Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
6. 289 Anti Theft System 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 560 586 Disposal 563 Appearance Care 569 Ashtray 253 Assist Hill Start 449 Assistance Towing 139 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Auto Up Power Windows 39 Automatic Dimming Mirror 113 Automatic Door Locks 35 616 INDEX Automatic Headlights 199 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 400 Automatic Transaxle Selection Of Lubricant 588 Automatic Transmission 422 567 Adding Fluid 568 Fluid and Filter Changes 568 Fluid Change 568 Fluid Level Check 568 Fluid Type 567 588 Gear Ranges 426 Special Additives
7. 419 Steering Power 437 438 Tilt Column 209 Wheel Heated 210 Wheel Tilt 209 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 389 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 389 Storage 254 582 Storage Bin 254 Storage Vehicle 412 582 Storing Your Vehicle 582 Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 172 Sun Roof 241 Sunglasses Storage 228 Sunroof Maintenance 244 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 70 Synthetic Engine Oil 550 System Remote Starting 29 Tachometer 286 Telescoping Steering Column 209 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 400 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 296 513 Tethe
8. 227 Courtesy Interior Lighting 228 Sunglass Storage Non Sunroof Only 228 Rear Courtesy Reading Lights If Equipped 230 Rear Overhead Consoles If Equipped 230 Garage Door Opener If Equipped 231 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 233 Programming A Rolling Code 234 Programming A Non Rolling Code 236 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 237 Using HomeLink 238 Security 239 Troubleshooting Tips 239 General Information 240 Power Sunroof If Equipped 241 Opening Sunroof Express 242 Opening The Sunroof Manual Mode 242 Closing Sunroof Express 242 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 242 Pinch Protect Feature 242 Pinch Protect Override 243 Venting Sunroof Express 243 Sunshade Operation
9. 512 Starting 419 Temperature Gauge 296 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 80 Entry System Illuminated 19 Ethanol 483 Event Data Recorder 83 Exhaust Gas Caution 51 99 486 Exhaust System 99 551 Extender Seat Belt 70 Exterior Folding Mirrors 114 Exterior Lights 103 Fabric Care 572 Filler Location Fuel 293 Filters Air Cleaner 551 Air Conditioning 413 556 Engine Oil 550 587 Engine Oil Disposal 550 Flash To Pass 204 Flashers Hazard Warning 512 Turn Signal 103 286 584 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range 490 En
10. 512 Jacking 513 521 Jump Starting 532 Overheating 512 Emission Control System Maintenance 545 Engine Air Cleaner 551 Block Heater 422 Break In Recommendations 98 Checking Oil Level 548 Compartment 543 Compartment Identification 543 Coolant Antifreeze 587 Cooling 559 Exhaust Gas Caution 51 99 486 620 INDEX Flooded Starting 420 Fuel Requirements 482 586 Oil 548 586 587 Oil Change Interval 549 Oil Disposal 550 Oil Filler Cap 549 Oil Filter Disposal 550 Oil Selection 549 586 Oil Synthetic 550 Overheating
11. 115 191 Methanol 483 Mini Trip Computer 310 Mirrors 112 Automatic Dimming 113 Electric Remote 114 Exterior Folding 114 Heated 115 Memory 191 Outside 113 Rearview 112 Vanity 117 Mode Fuel Saver 308 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 473 Mopar Parts 547 610 MTBE ETBE 483 Multi Function Control Lever 203 Navigation System Uconnect gps 224 New Vehicle Break In Period 98 Occupant Restraints 52 76 80 Occupant Restraints Sedan 74 76 79 Odometer
12. 435 Flowing Rising Water 435 Shallow Standing Water 436 Power Steering 437 Power Steering Fluid Check 438 Parking Brake 439 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 441 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light 443 Electronic Brake Control System 443 Traction Control System TCS 443 Brake Assist System BAS 444 Electronic Stability Control ESC 445 Hill Start Assist HSA 449 Tire Safety Information 452 Tire Markings 452 Tire Identification Number TIN 455 Tire Terminology And Definitions 456 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 457 Tires General Information 461 Tire Pressure 461 Tire Inflation Pressures 462 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 463 Radial Ply Tires 464 Spare Tire Matching Original
13. 483 Conserving 308 Economy Mode 424 Ethanol 483 Filler Cap Gas Cap 293 491 Filler Door Gas Cap 293 Gasoline 482 Gauge 293 Light 297 304 Materials Added 485 Methanol 483 Octane Rating 587 Requirements 482 586 Saver Mode 308 Tank Capacity 586 Fuel Optimizer 308 Fuel Saver 308 Fuel Flexible 487 Fueling 491 622 INDEX Fuses 575 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 231 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 491 492 544 Gasoline Fuel
14. 412 Outside Air Intake 412 Operating Tips 413 A C Air Filter 413 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Vents 5 Upper Glove Compartment 9 Storage Bin 13 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Lower Glove Compartment 10 Cup Holders 14 Dimmer Switch 3 Shift Lever 7 Climate Controls 11 Switch Bank 15 Headlight Switch 4 Radio 8 DVD If Equipped 12 Ignition Switch 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 4 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
15. 6 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 1 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at t
16. 482 Conserving 308 Gasoline Clean Air 483 Gasoline Reformulated 483 Gauges Coolant Temperature 296 Fuel 293 Speedometer 293 Tachometer 286 Gear Ranges 426 Gear Select Lever Override 537 General Information 17 28 155 482 Glass Cleaning 573 Gross Axle Weight Rating 493 496 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 493 496 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 125 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 435 Hazard Warning Flasher 512 Head Restraints 168 Headlights Bulb Replacement 583 Cleaning 573 Lights On Reminder 200 Passing 204 Replac
17. 260 Console Features 261 Basic Console 261 Premium Console If Equipped 262 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Super Console If Equipped 266 Cargo Area Features 268 Rechargeable Flashlight 268 Rear Window Features 269 Rear Window Defroster 269 Rear Load Leveling System If Equipped 270 Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 270 Deploying The Crossbars 272 Sun Screens If Equipped 277 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Manual Rearview Mirror 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight gl
18. 469 Rotation 472 Safety 452 461 Sizes 453 Snow Tires 472 Spare Tire 515 Spinning 467 Tread Wear Indicators 468 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 502 Towing 495 24 Hour Towing Assistance 139 Disabled Vehicle 538 Guide 501 Recreational 509 Weight 501 Towing Assistance 139 Traction Control 443 Traction Control Switch 443 632 INDEX Trailer Towing 495 Cooling System Tips 508 Hitches 500 Minimum Requirements 503 Trailer and Tongue Weight
19. 521 Securing The Spare Tire 527 Road Tire Installation 530 Jump Starting Procedure 532 Preparations For Jump Start 533 Jump Starting Procedure 534 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 536 Shift Lever Override 537 Towing A Disabled Vehicle 538 Without The Ignition Key 540 6 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situ
20. 568 Oil Engine 548 Power Steering 438 Disabled Vehicle Towing 538 10 INDEX 619 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 563 Engine Oil 550 Door Locks 32 Door Locks Automatic 35 Door Opener Garage 231 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 434 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 435 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 308 E 85 Fuel 487 Economy Fuel Mode 424 Electric Remote Mirrors 114 Electrical Power Outlets 244 Electronic Brake Control System 443 Brake Assist System 444 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 212 Electronic Stability Control ESC 445 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 224 300 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher
21. 284 286 Instrument Panel and Controls 283 Instrument Panel Cover 572 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 574 Integrated Power Module Fuses 575 Interior Appearance Care 572 Interior Lights 201 Introduction 4 Jack Location 514 Jack Operation 513 Jump Starting 532 Key In Reminder 15 Key Programming 17 Key Replacement 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 15 Keyless Entry System 20 Keys 12 Lane Change Assist 204 Lap Shoulder Belts 56 624 INDEX LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 89 Latches 103 Hood
22. 286 Oil Change Indicator 288 289 307 Oil Change Indicator Reset 288 289 307 Oil Engine 548 587 Capacity 586 Change Interval 549 Checking 548 Disposal 550 Filter 550 587 Filter Disposal 550 Identification Logo 549 Materials Added to 550 Recommendation 549 586 Synthetic 550 10 INDEX 627 Viscosity 549 586 Onboard Diagnostic System 544 545 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 231 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 112 113 Overhead Console 227 Overhead Travel Information Center 227 Overheating Engine 296 512 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 611 Panic Alarm
23. 289 Traction Control 448 Turn Signal 103 584 Voltage 297 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 286 Load Leveling System 270 Loading Vehicle 260 493 495 Capacities 495 Tires 457 Locks Automatic Door 35 Door 32 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 89 Lubrication Body 557 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 270 Maintenance Free Battery 553 Maintenance Procedures 547 Maintenance Schedule 590 Maintenance Sunroof 244 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 291 545 Manual Service 611 Map Reading Lights 228 Memory Feature Memory Seat 191 626 INDEX Memory Seat
24. 572 Vanity Mirrors 117 Variance Compass 313 Vehicle Certification Label 493 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 458 493 495 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage 412 582 10 INDEX 633 Voice Recognition System VR 155 Warning Flasher Hazard 512 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 286 Warnings and Cautions 6 Warranty Information 610 Washer Adding Fluid 558 Washing Vehicle 569 Water Driving Through 435 Wheel and Wheel Trim 571 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 571 Wind Buffeting 41 243 Window Fogging 412 Windows 36 Power 36 Rear Vent
25. 568 B Pillar Location 457 Battery 553 Jump Starting 532 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Saving Feature Protection 205 Belts Seat 100 Blind Spot Monitoring 117 Body Mechanism Lubrication 557 Brake Assist System 444 Brake Control System Electronic 443 Brake Fluid 588 Brake System 565 Fluid Check 565 Parking 439 Warning Light 294 Brake Transmission Interlock 424 Brakes 565 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 98 Bulb Replacement 583 Bulbs Light 103 582 Calibration Compass 312 Camera Rear
26. 113 Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 114 Outside Mirror Folding Feature 114 Power Mirrors If Equipped 114 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 115 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped 116 Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped 116 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 117 Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 117 Rear Cross Path 123 Modes Of Operation 124 Uconnect Phone If Equipped 125 Operation 128 3 Phone Call Features 135 Uconnect Phone Features 138 Advanced Phone Connectivity 143 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone 144 General Information 155 Voice Command If Equipped 155 Voice Command System Operation 155 Commands 156 Voice Training
27. 46 Child Seat 88 Clean Air Gasoline 483 Cleaning Wheels 571 Climate Control 392 Clock 322 332 Coat Hook 260 Coin Holder 261 Cold Weather Operation 420 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 391 Compact Spare Tire 465 Compass 312 Compass Calibration 312 Compass Variance 313 Computer Trip Travel 310 618 INDEX Connector UCI 346 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 346 Conserving Fuel 308 Console 261 Console Floor 261 Console Overhead 227 Console Removable
28. 512 Headlights 583 Headlights On Reminder 200 High Beam Indicator 286 High Beam Low Beam Select 204 Illuminated Entry 19 Interior 201 License 586 Lights On Reminder 200 Low Fuel 297 304 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 291 Oil Pressure 297 10 INDEX 625 Park 584 Passing 204 Reading 228 Rear Servicing 584 Rear Tail 584 Seat Belt Reminder 296 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 294 Service 582 583 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 291 Side Marker 584 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 294 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS
29. 224 Capacities Fluid 586 10 INDEX 617 Caps Filler Fuel 491 Oil Engine 549 Power Steering 438 Radiator Coolant Pressure 562 Car Washes 569 Carbon Monoxide Warning 99 486 Cargo Vehicle Loading 260 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier 270 Caution Exhaust Gas 51 Cellular Phone 125 391 Center High Mounted Stop Light 585 Chains Tire 470 Changing A Flat Tire 513 Chart Tire Sizing 453 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 291 545 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 99 Checks Safety 99 Child Restraint 84 86 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 89 Child Safety Locks
30. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513 WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area Turn the two cover latches to release the cover Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack jack handle and tools Jack And Tool Location 514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by means of a cable winch mechanism The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console
31. 607 Prepare For The Appointment 607 Prepare A List 607 Be Reasonable With Requests 607 If You Need Assistance 607 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 608 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 608 In Mexico Contact 608 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 609 Service Contract 609 Warranty Information 610 MOPAR Parts 610 Reporting Safety Defects 610 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 610 In Canada 611 Publication Order Forms 611 9 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades 613 Treadwear 613 Traction Grades 613 Temperature Grades 614 606 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
32. Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following Change to setup Switch to system setup Change to setup Main menu setup or Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In
33. Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track
34. Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 62 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped 62 Energy Management Feature 63 Seat Belt Pretensioners 64 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR If Equipped 64 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert 68 Seat Belt Lock Out 69 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 69 Seat Belt Extender 70 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags 70 Air Bag System Components 72 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 73 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 76 Event Data Recorder EDR 83 Child Restraints 84 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Commercial Cargo Vehicles No Factory Installed Rear Seats If Equipped 95 Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles 96 Engine Break In Recommendations 98 Safety Tips
35. Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and the power steering and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 591 At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter Inspect the brake hoses and lines Open the left and right door slowly and inspect for excessive dirt If noise exist wipe clean and apply krytox lube to the door rollers CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 592 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tir
36. Continued 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid The six speed transmission is equipped with a capped dipstick tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause de
37. Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Continued 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Continued Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent
38. Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Supplemen
39. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non H
40. Locking The Remote Control 371 Replacing The Remote Control Batteries 372 Headphones Operation 372 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Controls 373 Replacing The Headphone Batteries 374 Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty 374 System Information 376 Steering Wheel Audio Controls If Equipped 389 Radio Operation 390 CD Player 390 CD DVD Disc Maintenance 391 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 391 Climate Controls 392 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System If Equipped 392 Rear Manual Climate Control If Equipped 397 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 400 Summer Operation 411 Winter Operation 412 Vacation Storage 412 Window Fogging
41. NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch the Electronic Stability Program ESP to Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Operating for further information CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring 536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Remove the shift lever override access cover located near the top right of the shift lever i
42. Once the screen is completely to the top of the window extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window To lower the sun screen gently lift the tab upward to disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the base sill Sun Screen Extended 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Instrument Panel Features 283 Instrument Cluster Base 284 Instrument Cluster Premium 285 Instrument Cluster Descriptions 286 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped 300 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 302 Fuel Economy 308 Vehicle Speed 309 Trip Info 310 Tire Psi 310 Units 311 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 311 Messages 311 Compass Temperature Display 312 Customer Programmable Features System Setup
43. The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 590 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD SAFE or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month
44. The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Re
45. 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued CAUTION Continued Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 436 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Driving through standing water limits your
46. 61 And Pregnant Women 69 Child Restraint 84 85 86 Extender 70 Front Seat 56 Inspection 100 Pretensioners 64 Rear Seat 56 Seats 160 Adjustment 166 Fold in Floor Stow n Go 172 Heated 163 Memory 191 Power 160 Reclining 167 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 172 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 560 587 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance 607 Service Contract 609 Service Engine Soon Light
47. City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Recreational towing is not allowed CAUTION DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drive train will result NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 509 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Hazard Warning Flashers 512 If Your Engine Overheats 512 Jacking And Tire Changing 513 Jack Location 514 Spare Tire Removal 515 To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut 515 Spare Tire Tools 517 Spare Tire Removal Instructions 519 Preparations For Jacking 521 Jacking Instructions
48. Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in Engl
49. NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat ONLY This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 2 7 in 22 7 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7
50. Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main
51. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Please see Tread Wear Indicators and Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 469 WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensi
52. Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Sentry Key 15 Replacement Keys 16 Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 Rearming Of The System 17 Illuminated Entry If Equipped 19 Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 20 Using The RKE Transmitter 20 Remote Starting System If Equipped 29 How To Use Remote Start 29 Door Locks 32 Manual Door Locks 32 Power Door Locks If Equipped 34 Windows 36 Power Vent Windows If Equipped 36 Power Windows 36 2 Sliding Side Door 41 Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped 42 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock 46 Liftgate 48 Power Liftgate If Equipped 49 Occupant Restraints 52 Lap Shoulder Belts 56
53. 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan
54. After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the Rating Level menu is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons select the new rating level and then press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change Product Agreement This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses other wise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby MLP Lossless and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All right re served 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL General Information This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock p
55. Carbon Monoxide Warnings 486 Flexible Fuel If Equipped 487 E 85 General Information 487 Ethanol Fuel E 85 488 Fuel Requirements 488 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 489 Starting 490 Cruising Range 490 Replacement Parts 490 Maintenance 490 Adding Fuel 491 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 491 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 492 Vehicle Loading 493 Vehicle Certification Label 493 Trailer Towing 495 Common Towing Definitions 496 Towing Tips 508 Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 509 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 509 418 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PR
56. Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 Window Open Close 2 Power Door Locks 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks lock or unlock On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Vent Windows If Equipped The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver s door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent windows from the driver s seat Power Windows You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver s door trim panel The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power acces sory delay Power Vent Window Switch Open Close 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Power Window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening a front door will cancel this feature Power Window Lockout Switch
57. If Equipped The driver may lock out the rear power windows by depressing the bar switch just below the power window switches Driver s Power Window Switches Power Window Lockout Switch 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and locks and unlocks all doors The switch will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 Window Open Close 2 Power Door Locks 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Auto Down Feature If Equipped The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes depending on the accessory delay setting after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped The front driver and front passenger switches may be equipped with an Auto Up feature Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically
58. Manual Recline To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Fold Flat To fold the seat lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion Easy Entry The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into the third row With the Quad seat in the fold flat position lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward Fold Flat Quad Seat Easy Entry Lever 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For passengers seated in the third row there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the seatback and accessing the easy entry lever To provide additional space behind the second row seats the seats can be folded forward With the seat in its fold flat position
59. 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 6 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero This also displays Trip A and Trip B DTE MPG or L 100km OAT Outside Air Te
60. 10 Amp Red Trailer Tow M5 25 Amp Natural Inverter Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M6 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 1 ACC Rain Sensor Cigar Lighter Instru ment Panel or with Console Rear M7 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 2 BATT ACC SELECT Center Seat or with Console Rear M8 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat If Equipped M9 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat If Equipped 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M10 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw Video System Satel lite Radio DVD Hands Free Module Universal Garage Door Opener Vanity Lamp Streaming Video Module If Equipped M11 10 Amp Red Climate Control System M12 30 Amp Green Amplifier Radio M13 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster SIREN Clock Mod ule Multi Function Control Switch If Equipped Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M14 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow If Equipped M15 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror Instrument Cluster Multi Function Control Switch Tire Pressure Monitor Glow Plug Module If Equipped M16 10 Amp Red Airbag Module Occupant Classifica tion Module M17 15 Amp Blue Left Tail License Park Lamp Running Lamps M18 15 Amp Blue Right Tail Park Run Lamp 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse
61. 160 Seats 160 Power Seats If Equipped 160 Power Lumbar If Equipped 162 Heated Seats If Equipped 163 Manual Front Second Row Seat Adjuster 166 Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 167 Head Restraints 168 Stow n Go Seating If Equipped 172 Quad Seats If Equipped 178 Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped 184 Third Row Power Recline If Equipped 186 Third Row Power Folding Seat If Equipped 186 Manually Folding Third Row Seats If Equipped 188 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks 191 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 191 Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory 192 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 195 To Open And Close The Hood 196 Lights 198 Headlight Switch
62. 196 Lead Free Gasoline 482 Leaks Fluid 103 Life of Tires 468 Liftgate 48 Light Bulbs 103 Lights 103 198 Airbag 77 83 101 293 Alarm 294 Anti Lock 289 Automatic Headlights 199 Back Up 584 Battery Saver 205 Brake Assist Warning 448 Brake Warning 294 Bulb Replacement 582 583 Center Mounted Stop 585 Daytime Running 200 Dimmer Switch Headlight 201 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 448 Engine Temperature Warning 298 Exterior 103 Fog 201 286 584 Hazard Warning Flasher
63. 265 Contract Service 609 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 562 Cooling System 559 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 561 Coolant Capacity 586 Coolant Level 559 563 Disposal of Used Coolant 563 Drain Flush and Refill 560 Inspection 563 Points to Remember 563 Pressure Cap 562 Radiator Cap 562 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 560 586 587 Cupholders 250 574 Customer Assistance 607 Data Recorder Event 83 Daytime Running Lights 200 Dealer Service 547 Defroster Rear Window 269 Defroster Windshield 101 406 Diagnostic System Onboard 544 Dimmer Control 201 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission
64. 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pressed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds 4 Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 right side of the screen When the selector switch is in the Channel 2 position the remote controls the function ality of headphone Channel 2 left side of the screen 5 In radio modes press to seek the next tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 6 Prev In radio modes press to select to the previous station In disc modes press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 7 MENU Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc to select a satellite audio channel from the Station list or select playback modes SCAN RANDOM for a CD 8 Play Pause Begin resume or pause disc play 9 Stop Stops disc play 10 PROG Up Down When listening to a radio mode pressing PROG Up selects
65. 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com 612 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to
66. Adjustable Pedal Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System
67. During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power
68. Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX
69. Lightly tighten the lug nuts 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud 3 Wheel Lug Nut 530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 102 ft lbs 138 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 7 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
70. Malfunction Indicator 291 Service Manuals 611 Setting the Clock 322 332 Settings Personal 314 Shift Lever Override 537 Shoulder Belts 56 Side Airbag 79 Signals Turn 103 203 204 286 584 Sliding Door 41 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 434 Snow Chains Tire Chains 470 630 INDEX Snow Tires 472 Spare Tire 465 466 515 Speed Control Cruise Control 212 Speedometer 293 Starting 419 Automatic Transmission 419 Cold Weather 420 Engine Fails to Start 420 Remote 29 Starting and Operating 419 Starting Procedures
71. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 595 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 596 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Serv
72. Press the OPEN CLOSE or LOAD hard key on the radio faceplate Touch Screen 2 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 4 To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 or 2 highlight DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by re peatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER NOTE Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen The VES will retain the last setting when turned off Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Touch the 1 or 2 soft key based on the channel you want to change and t
73. Press the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the selections below Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Messages Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Mes sages XX displays highlighted in the EVIC If there is more than one message pressing the SELECT button will display a stored warning message Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining stored messages If there are no message pressing t
74. Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to retur
75. The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued CAUTION Continued To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia
76. a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 489 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an in
77. also keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to f
78. always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations RCP Detection Zones 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including radio muting WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when bac
79. and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 607 This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 608 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed spec
80. and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button
81. as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses United States MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 482 STARTING AND OPERATING Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms
82. been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters
83. commands 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power seats for the driver and front passenger The power seat swit
84. end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 102 ft lbs 138 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts
85. if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Adjustable Anchorage 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraint section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR N A ALR Third Row ALR Cinch ALR N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
86. it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter DO NOT crank the engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 421 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver s side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate w
87. mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product 588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Maintenance Schedule 590 Required Maintenance Intervals 592 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is neces sary On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE
88. perature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 2 Rear Blower Control If Equipped Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you select The rear blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are seven blower speeds To allow the rear overhead control turn blower knob fully to the left past The O off position 3 Front Blower Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O Off position There are seven blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Manual Temperature Control 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 4 Rear Temperature Control If Equipped Provides temperature control for the rear cabin Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin 5 Right Front Temperature Control Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings 6 Mix Mode Air is directed through the
89. the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps Variable bit rates are also supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1kHz or 48kHz To change the current file use the remote control s or DVD player s button to advance to the next file or the button to return to the start of the current or previous file To change the current directory use the remote con trol s PROG Up and Down buttons 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 Disc Errors If the DVD player is unable to read the disc a Disc Error message is displayed on the VES and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected A dirty damaged or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2 0 seconds the DVD player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward 1 0 to 3 0 seconds at a time If the end of the disc is reached the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions such as when the vehicle s interior tempera ture is above 120 F When this occurs the DVD player will display VES High Temp and will shut off the VES displays until a safe temperature i
90. you will experience reduced vehicle perfor mance until the automatic transmission cools down Once the transmission has cooled down and the light turns off you may continue to drive normally If the high speed is maintained the overheating will continue to occur If the overheating continues it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Radio Information Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info Tire PSI Vehicle Info Messages Units System Setup Personal Settings Turn Me
91. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion NOTE The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped The power sliding door may be opened or closed manually or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter overhead console switch or rear door switch Pulling the inside or outside power sliding door handle will also power open or close the power sliding door NOTE Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a second time while the sliding door is power opening or power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or closed manually Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door When the door is fully open pressing the button twice within five se
92. 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer 610 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard Am
93. 502 Wiring 506 Trailer Towing Guide 501 Trailer Weight 501 Transaxle Selection of Lubricant 588 Transmission 567 Automatic 422 567 Fluid 567 588 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 231 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting Pets 95 Tread Wear Indicators 468 Trip Odometer 286 Turn Signals 204 286 584 UCI Connector 346 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 125 Umbrella Holder 256 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 613 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 346 Universal Transmitter 231 Unleaded Gasoline 482 Upholstery Care
94. 586 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 587 Engine 587 Chassis 588 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Air Filter 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Battery 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Totally Integrated Power Module Fuses 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control s
95. Description M19 25 Amp Natural Powertrain M20 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light Switch Bank Steering Column Module Switch Steering Wheel M21 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain M22 10 Amp Red Horn M23 10 Amp Red Horn M24 25 Amp Natural Rear Wiper Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M25 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Diesel Lift Pump If Equipped M26 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch Driver Window Switch M27 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module Keyless Entry Module M28 10 Amp Red Powertrain Transmis sion Control Module M29 10 Amp Red Occupant Classifica tion Module M30 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Module Power Folding Mirror M31 20 Amp Yellow Back Up Lamps 580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M32 10 Amp Red Airbag Module THATCHUM If Equipped M33 10 Amp Red Powertrain M34 10 Amp Red Park Assist Heater Climate Control Module Headlamp Wash Compass Rear Camera Door Lamps Flashlight Relay Die sel Cabin Heater Rad Fan Diesel If Equipped M35 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M36 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet 3 Instrument Panel or with Console Center M37 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes Sta bility Control Stop Lamp Fuel Pump M38 25 Amp Natura
96. Empty DTE Miles Per Gallon MPG Average Fuel Economy This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button When the fuel economy is reset the display will read zero for two seconds Then the history informa tion will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Distance To Empty DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph form while driving This will monitor the gas mileage in real time as you drive and
97. HAZ ARD switch ON 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous procedure Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the second row sliding door switches and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the OFF position the power sliding side door may not be opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the b pillar trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating the inside power sliding door handle Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch 1 Left Door 3 Right Door 2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward toward the vehicle to engage the C
98. If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated
99. Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems Maximum number of folder levels 8 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only
100. Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while pr
101. Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key Turning ParkView On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key OVERHEAD CONSOLES Front Overhead Console Two versions of the overhead console are available The base front overhead console model featured fixed incan descent courtesy reading lights flip down sunglass stor age and conversation mirror The premium front over head console model features a LED focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cupholders two swiv eling LED lights flip down sunglass storage conversa tion mirror optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch NOTE Premium sunroof console models include all of above except sunglass storage Overhead Console 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Courtesy Interior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights standard dome light has two buttons The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your
102. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Second Row Seat Storage Bins If Equipped The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of the second row seats The area below the covers can be used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Lock position to allow greater access to the storage bin CAUTION NOTE The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover Storage Bin 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 WARNING In a collision serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down Storage Bin Safety Warning Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle WARNING Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow children to have access to the second row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke In a collision serious i
103. Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompt
104. a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 from the list press the button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phon
105. able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the button to begin 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and
106. account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality
107. adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sud
108. anchorages located in the rear surface of the seatback In addition all third row fold in floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts Installing the Lower Attachments 1 The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback LATCH Anchorages Second Row Anchorages Shown 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint attachment straps
109. before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR 494 STARTING AND OPERATING Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break o
110. body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Alway
111. bulb 3 Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the headlamp housing 4 Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked into the headlamp housing CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red lock tab forward 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583 Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing 2 Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the headlamp housing then pull the bulb out 3 Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp housing Fog Lamps NOTE Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the fascia On the left rear side of the fascia remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam 1 From behind the bumper fascia or the access panel on the air dam squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 2 Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb 3 Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall by inserting the new b
112. button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console Overhead Console Master Power Switch 1 Left Door 3 Right Door 2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening Pushing once will only close the liftgate This button cannot be used to open the liftgate When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the Flash Lights feature is enabled the tail lights will flash and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance Rear Power Liftgate Switch 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position During power operation whether liftgate is fully open or fully
113. button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems Maximum number of folder levels 8 Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will
114. can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button a
115. contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The following Fuel Economy func tions display in the EVIC Average Fuel Economy AVG Distance To
116. control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or undefined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies P
117. conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Instrument Panel Outlets 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 One outlet in the removable floor console if equipped shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also connected to the battery Do not exceed a maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps shared between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power outlets are located under the retractable cover To access the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it toward the instrument panel Removable Console Outlet Super Console Outlets 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con trolled by the ig
118. driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a reverse gear the driver s side mirror will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert Blind Spot Alert Lights Blind Spot Alert Lights CHM Blind Spot Alert Off The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Alert Lights mode when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activate
119. extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued WARNING Continued Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
120. flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover WARNING In a collision serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down Seat In Storage Bin 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 To Unstow Second Row Seats 1 Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover 2 Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors 3 Lift the seatback to the full upright position 4 Return the head restraint to its upright position close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Unlocked position Stow n Go Seat Folded And Latched Position To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched position return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward 1 Return the seatback to the upright position 2 Return the head restraint to the upright position Raising The Seatback 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard sid
121. for signs of wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature is 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature is 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature co
122. from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filter
123. front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 601 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 602 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 603 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle
124. if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child
125. jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Media Center 130 RES RSC 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The
126. left will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the shift lever to the left or right will change the top available gear 432 STARTING AND OPERATING To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury Odometer Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 D Actual Gear s Allowed 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 6 NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking tap the shift lever to the left repeatedly as the vehicle slows The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture vehicle speed is sufficiently high and the driver is not heavil
127. markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 2 Seatback 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s se
128. mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If your vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC your dealership can activate deactivate this feature for you For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel below the steering column 2 Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the center of the hood opening Locate then push the safety catch downward while raising the hood at the same time Hood Release Lever 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Safety Lever Location Hood Prop Rod 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 12 in 30 cm and then drop it This should secure both latch
129. mode with the VES only the radio is able to control the radio functions In this case VES can share the radio mode but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VES selected radio mode When shared the radio has priority over the VES or all radio modes FM AM and SAT The VES has the ability to switch tuner AM FM SEEK SCAN TUNE and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES have control of the video functions The VES has the ability to control the following video modes 1 CD Ability to Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down 2 CD Changer in radio Ability to Disk Up Down and program all listed CD controls Fast Forward Rewind Scan and Track Up Down The VES can even control radio modes or video modes while the radio is turned off The VES can access the radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES and activating a radio mode or disc mode 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Information Mode Display 1 Channel 1 Mode 2 Channel 1 Shared Status 3 Channel 1 Audio Only Mute 4 Channel 2 Mode 5 Channel 2 Shared Status 6 Channel 2 Audio Only Mute 7 Channel 1 ENTER Button Action 8 Channel 2 ENTER Button Action 9 Clock 10 Video Lock 11 Not Available Error 12 Disc Changer Status Information Mode
130. of the disc Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play Display Settings Disc Menu For CDs Video Screen Display Settings 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 When watching a video source DVD Video with the disc in Play mode Aux Video etc pressing the remote control s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances To change the settings press the remote control s navi gation buttons to select an item then press the remote control s navigation buttons to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control s ENTER button Disc Features control the remote DVD player s if equipped settings of DVD being watched in the remote player Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed Set the audio to the desired source and channel Close the video screen To change the current audio mode press the remote control s MODE button This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode Select menu When the screen is reopened the vide
131. only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from
132. or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
133. or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories Positive Battery Post 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this proce
134. or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death Tilt Telescoping Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start
135. out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dial
136. outlets 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Front Three Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode operation a comfort temperature can be set by using the temperature up and down buttons and the auto blower operation will be set automatically The system can be controlled manually if desired SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting driver setting for the cabin if desired The Three Zone ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passen gers The system automatically adjusts the air temperature the airflow volume amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction This maintains a comfortable tem perature even under changing conditions Front ATC Panel 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Air Conditioning A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 2 Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant 3 Mode Display This di
137. outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors The driver s outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The driver s outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en abled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position NOTE Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Illu
138. pull upward on the easy access release lever and lift the seat into the desired position Pull Strap for Third Row Passengers Fold Flat Release Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Pull out the retainer strap from the sewn in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion Place the strap around the grab handle located on the B Pillar Before securing the strap adjust the buckle for proper fit Secure the retainer strap to the inside grab handle located on the B Pillar When not in use store the strap in the sewn in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion Retainer Strap B Pillar Grab Handle 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury Retainer strap must always be securely attached to grab handle when seat is folded forward and vehicle is moving Never occupy the seat or the center seat behind a seat that has been folded forward Retainer Strap 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Removal The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is needed With the seat in the easy entry position lift the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor latches Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped While the bench seat does not stow in the floor it is removable for added cargo space Cross Beam for Seat Removal Second Row Bench Seat 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Release levers a
139. rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing NOTE With all rear seats stowed or removed 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONSOLE FEATURES There are three consoles available Basic Premium and Super WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Basic Console Basic Console features consist of the following The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage cups or 20 oz 6 L plastic bottles Cupholders are dishwasher safe for cleaning The cupholders are removable to access a large storage bin The basic console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at the console base To Remove The Basic Floor Console 1 Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip 2 Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook 3 Remo
140. reference the child restraint seat in structions to ease the installation NOTE It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle seat and child restraint 3 Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to the vehicle s lower anchor bars Ensure that the lower attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is secure 4 Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly push ing the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat Remove all slack in the lower attachment straps Reference the child restraint instructions for infor mation on properly removing slack LATCH Anchorages Third Row 60 40 Anchorages Shown 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Installing the Top Tether Strap with either Lower Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt 1 Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head restraint between the steel posts 2 Provide enough slack reference child restraint in structions for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor located near the bottom of the seat back 3 Clip tether hook to tether anchor Ensure that the hook is firmly engaged and secure 4 Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE The top tether strap is always to be secured regardless of if the child restraint is installed
141. remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that ge
142. result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio
143. shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure require ments found on the tire placard label located on the driver s side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure Tire Rotation 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 473 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural air pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommen
144. speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button 2 Say a command e g Help 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands Radio to switch to the radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode Memo to switch to the memo recorder Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency
145. support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint if equipped Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that span the front second and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE All seat belt systems except the driver s and third row center include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat Please pay close attention
146. system 2 To return to Front screen press REAR button again or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds 1 Mode Display This display shows the current Mode selection 2 Rear Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 3 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection 4 Rear Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC display along with two temperatures for the driver and front passenger The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver front passen ger and rear seat rotary temperature knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickl
147. system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SABs Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damag
148. that are outside the detection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Sensor Locations BSM Warning Light 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adj
149. the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle The message Remote Start Active Key To Run will display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON RUN position Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm Any engine warning lights come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The shift lever is moved out of PARK The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the Remote Start Mode the system will not allow the Remote Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request When To Reset Remote Start The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start ing After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the v
150. the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions Driver Memory Switch 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory position using the other numbered Memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK butt
151. the current audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 18 ENTER Press to select the highlighted option in a menu 19 NEXT In radio modes press to select to the next station In disc modes press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter In menu modes use to navigate in the menu 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Remote Control Storage The video screen s come with a built in storage compart ment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened To remove the remote use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove To return the remote back into its storage area insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position Locking The Remote Control All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature To disable the Remote Control from making any changes follow the radio s instructions select menu rear VES lock If the vehicle is not equipped with a The Remote Control Storage 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 DVD player follow the radio s instructions to turn Video Lock on The radio and the video screen s indicate when Video Lock is active Pressing the Video Lock again or tu
152. the head lights will come on in the Automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON the delay will be cancelled 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on To change the timer setting see your autho rized dealer The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur
153. the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued WARNING Continued Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt
154. the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued WARNING Continued Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety
155. the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued Active Head Restraint Tilted 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Second Row Quad Seats To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Head Restraints Second Row Bench To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Head Restraints Third Row The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing Refer to Occupant Re straints in Thing
156. this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 613 Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 614 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE INDEX 10 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 561 Adding Fuel 491 Adding Washer Fluid 558 Additives Fuel 485
157. to two channels which may result in a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 Recorded Discs The VES DVD player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 or WMA files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or re corded are not supported If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cases where the VES DVD player may not be able to play some or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as UDF HFS or others are not supported The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc If you are still h
158. try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 483 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate i
159. until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Redial Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The
160. up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust the following MOPAR wheel cleaners are recommended or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner For chrome wheels use MOPAR Chrome Cleaner Part 04318013 or equivalent For aluminum wheels use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner Part 04796239AB or equivalent CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Use only the approved MOPAR Wheel Cleaners or equivalent Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571 For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clea
161. usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569 Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finis
162. vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows LED lamps only The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console pre mium console only This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down Sunglass Storage Non Sunroof Only At the front of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses From the closed position press the door latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to the full open position Over Door Latch 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE From this position the door can be fully closed or by rotating upward about 3 4 of the way and releasing positioned for conversation mirror use NOTE From the conversation mirror position the door can only be closed To return to the full open position the door must first be closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to release Full Open Position Conversation Mirror Posit
163. vehicle was purchased Language Code Language Code Dutch 2311 French 1517 German 1304 Italian 1819 Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 Rating and Password Setup The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches Most DVD Video discs have a rating from 1 to 8 assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences When a DVD Video disc is loaded its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player a Password screen is displayed In order to watch the disc the rear passen ger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below To play all discs without requiring a password set the DVD player s rating to Level 8 Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc Not all DVD discs encode a Rating so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password The default rating is Level 8 play all discs without a password and the default password is 0000 DVD Password Entry 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To set the password activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but tons sele
164. vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on the same channel If watching a video on Screen 1 second row then Channel 2 could be used for audio If watching a video on Screen 2 third row then Channel 1 could be used for audio Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The VES Column 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and either the Mode Select Screen will display or a small banner will appear at the bottom of the screen 2 To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 or 2 either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or press the MODE button repeatedly until the desired audio source appears on the screen Select FM Mode On The VES screen 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed touch the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 while a video is playing on Channel Screen 2 touch the 1 soft key and choose an audio source To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is p
165. with the lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting Second Row Anchorage Shown 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to LATCH Anchorages Third Row 60 40 Anchorage Shown 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR N A ALR Third Row ALR Cinch ALR N A Not Applicabl
166. with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginnin
167. 0 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 112 000 miles 182 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 599 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate a
168. 00 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 459 460 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cau
169. 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Steps 1 3 above NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If The Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle Continued 420 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure
170. 18 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Removal Instructions The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the center console area 1 Assemble the spare tire tools into a T handle and place the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut 2 Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Spare Tire And Cover 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519 3 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch T handle extensions to form a spare tire hook and pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle 4 Stand the tire cover assembly upright and remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs together Push the retainer through the spare tire to release it from the wheel Pulling Spare Tire Removing Wheel Spacer 520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traf
171. 198 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 199 Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped 199 Headlight Delay If Equipped 199 Lights On Reminder 200 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 200 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 201 Dimmer Controls 201 Multifunction Lever 203 Turn Signals 204 Lane Change Assist 204 High Low Beam Switch 204 Flash To Pass 204 Battery Protection 205 Windshield Wiper And Washers 205 Intermittent Wiper System 206 Windshield Wiper Operation 206 Windshield Washers 206 Mist Feature 207 Rear Wiper And Washer 207 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 207 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 209 Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 210 Adjustable Pedals I
172. 2 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools back in the stowage compartment 13 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required Securing The Spare Tire 1 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T handle and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527 WARNING A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare tire hook and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem bly Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side CAUTION The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used when the compact spare tire is store
173. 243 Wind Buffeting 243 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Sunroof Maintenance 244 Ignition Off Operation 244 Sunroof Fully Closed 244 Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 244 Power Inverter If Equipped 249 Cupholders 250 Instrument Panel Cupholders 250 Super Console If Equipped 251 Premium Console Cupholders If Equipped 252 Interior Bottle Holders 252 Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped 253 Storage 254 Glove Compartments 254 Door Trim Panel Storage 255 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped 256 Umbrella Holder 256 Second Row Seat Storage Bins If Equipped 257 Storage Bin Safety Warning 258 Coat Hooks 260 Cargo Area Storage
174. 5 persons amp Luggage 3 350 lbs 1 519 kg 335 lbs 152 kg 8 750 lbs 3 969 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 6 to 7 persons amp Luggage 3 000 lbs 1 360 kg 300 lbs 136 kg For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo luggage or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver a
175. Adjustable Pedals 211 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 551 Air Conditioner Maintenance 555 Air Conditioning 392 Air Conditioning Controls 392 Air Conditioning Filter 413 556 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 555 Air Conditioning System 392 400 555 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 392 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 413 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 397 408 Air Pressure Tires 462 Airbag 70 79 Airbag Deployment 80 Airbag Light 77 83 101 293 Airbag Maintenance 82 Airbag Side 74 76 79 Airbag Window Side Curtain 74 76 79 Alarm Security Alarm 17 Alarm Light 294 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 343 Anti Lock Warning Light
176. Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 25 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 26 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the auto matic transmission oil may become too hot When the transmission overheat warning light turns on
177. CAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer as soon as possible 492 STARTING AND OPERATING VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Rear Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to re
178. CROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every t
179. EHICLE 127 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any p
180. Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped 464 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 465 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Full Size Spare If Equipped 466 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 466 Tire Spinning 467 Tread Wear Indicators 468 Life Of Tire 468 Replacement Tires 469 Tire Chains 470 Snow Tires 472 Tire Rotation Recommendations 472 Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 473 Base System 476 Premium System If Equipped 478 Fuel Requirements 482 3 6L Engine 482 Reformulated Gasoline 483 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 483 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 484 MMT In Gasoline 485 Materials Added To Fuel 485 Fuel System Cautions 485
181. G YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the RETURN button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VEHICLE NOT IN PARK displays when you try to select System Setup from the main menu Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System Setup is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC Then press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup sub menu Press and release the UP or DOWN button to select a feature form the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes
182. Grand Caravan Chrysler Group LLC O W N E R S M A N U A L 2 0 1 2 2012 Grand Caravan 12Y532 126 AA First Edition Printed in U S A 903656_Grand Caravan_OM cover indd 1 3 15 11 10 41 AM VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tio
183. In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gen erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 467 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Distance driven WARNING The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline
184. LE WARNING Continued Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service atten dant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE
185. LESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the Panic Alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three button RKE trans mitters and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven button RKE transmitters Using the RKE Transmitter Three button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN LOCK LOCK and PANIC functions Key Fob With Three Button RKE Transmitter 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seven button RKE transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to operate the power liftgate optional power sliding doors Remote Start feature optional Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences For example flas
186. Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate Parking Brake 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 439 NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK
187. OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or anti rust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrat
188. OCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Press the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting 1 Do not press the accelerator 2 Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 419 3 If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to
189. ON 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 415 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 589 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 605 10 INDEX 615 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Introduction 4 How To Use This Manual 4 Warnings And Cautions
190. ON If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Continued WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an collision Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin or a seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 506 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following four pin connector and seven pin connector illustrations Four Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Ri
191. Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools
192. RUMENT PANEL Operating Tips A C Air Filter On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con trol ATC the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air Refer to Air Conditioning in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Starting Procedures 419 Automatic Transmission 419 Normal Starting 419 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 420 If The Engine Fails To Start 420 After Starting 421 Engine Block Heater If Equipped 422 Automatic Transmission 422 Key Ignition Park Interlock 423 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 424 Fuel Economy Econ Mode 424 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 425 Gear Ranges 426 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 434 Acceleration 434 Traction 435 5 Driving Through Water
193. SB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display USB Connector Port 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track
194. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped 464 STARTING AND OPERATING with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Com
195. TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL
196. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 440 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake perform
197. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status ParkSense Warning Display Park Assist System ON 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist System OFF Slow Tone 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is clo
198. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Auto Up Reset If Equipped To reactivate the Auto Up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the
199. UR INSTRUMENT PANEL When connecting an external source to the AUX input be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle s Owner s Manual for more information Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at the video screen highlight VES AUX 1 or 2 depending which AUX input the gaming console is plugged into by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER on the Remote Control Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen 3 Touch the 1 soft key and then touch either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column depending which AUX input is used To exit press the back arrow soft key at the top of the screen Rear VES Soft key Select Channel Screen 1 And AUX 1 In The VES Column 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 Wh
200. USB port located in the glove compart ment iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB connector port which is located in the glove compartment Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to U
201. Video Screen Display 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 Numeric Keypad Menu When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE pressing the remote control s ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu This screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency satellite channel or track number To enter the desired digit 1 Press the remote control s navigation buttons to navigate to the desired digit 2 When the digit is highlighted press the remote con trol s ENTER button to select the digit Repeat these steps until all digits are entered 3 To delete the last digit navigate to the Del button and press the remote control s ENTER button 4 After all of the digits are entered navigate to the Go button and press the remote control s ENTER button Station List Menu When listening to Satellite audio pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all available channels Navigate this list using the remote control s navigation buttons to find the desired station Numeric Keypad Menu 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL press the remote control s ENTER button to tune to that station To jump through the list more quickly navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen Disc Menu When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pressing the remote control s MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback
202. When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563 normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning
203. a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com mercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abra sive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the ins
204. acent lanes from either side of the vehicle Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Approaching Overtaking Passing 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system
205. act that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 609 We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the
206. actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Basic TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors TPMS Telltale Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value located on the placard label on the driver s side B Pillar The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information 476 STARTING AND OPERATING T
207. ad the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 493 WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
208. age illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle
209. al condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control described later in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range Shift Lever 426 STARTING AND OPERATING PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion t
210. all as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565 WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces
211. ammable Electronic Features 314 Radial Ply Tires 464 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 560 562 628 INDEX Radio Operation 391 Radio Remote Controls 389 Rear Air Conditioning 397 408 Rear Camera 224 Rear Cross Path 123 Rear Heater 397 Rear Park Sense System 215 Rear Window Defroster 269 Rearview Mirrors 112 Reclining Front Seats 167 Recorder Event Data 83 Recreational Towing 509 Reformulated Gasoline 483 Reminder Seat Belt 68 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 389 Remote Starting System 29 Removable Floor Console 265 Replacement Keys 16 R
212. an proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties
213. ance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop A clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 441 A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti cated electronic equipment that may be suscep tible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued WARNING Continued The Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent colli sions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns follow
214. and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag u
215. and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the dome defeat position extreme bottom position 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 REMOTE KEY
216. are from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirror Foldin
217. arming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed Move the shift lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not move the shift lever between PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before moving the shift lever into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK 422 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before
218. at until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism Hand Positioning Points On AHR 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half NOTE If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
219. ate s zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star plus pound add location all Voice Commands Primary Alternate s call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais help home 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Voice Commands Primary Alternate s language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no other pair a phone phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book previous record again redial Voice Commands Primary Alternate s return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again voice training work yes 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite
220. ations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING
221. aving trouble writing a disc that is playable in the VES DVD player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compressed Audio Files MP3 and WMA The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Windows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If you are creating your own files
222. because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position In order to prevent fogging when the Recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel the A C will engage automatically The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection 10 Air Conditioning A C Button Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 11 Floor Mode Button Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets 12 Bi Level Mode Button Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions 13 Panel Mode Button Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outle
223. being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 CAUTION Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oi
224. can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the Average Fuel Economy Display 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons to highlight one of the following functions if you want to reset it Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset A Trip Function Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected highlighted Press and hold the SELECT button to clear the resettable function being displayed Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays highlighted in the EVIC
225. can burn CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do n
226. ches are located on the outboard side of the seat The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Driver Power Seat Switch 1 Seat Switch 2 Seatback Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
227. chieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the tempe
228. click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increa
229. closed the liftgate chime will beep several times indicating power operation is in progress The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must be opened or closed manually If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F 62 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate buttons If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Continued 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Continued If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props
230. conds a second time will close the door There are power sliding side door switches located on the b pillar trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE for the driver and passengers Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door If the switch is pressed while the door is under a power cycle the door will reverse direction NOTE The power sliding side door must be unlocked before the power sliding door switches will operate If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding side door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled and will go into manual mode To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the power sliding door master lock button located in the overhead console to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen gers NOTE The power sliding side door switches will not open if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph 0 km h the brake must be pressed Power Sliding Door Switch 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening the door will automati cally reverse to the closed or open p
231. conds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 477 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important to regularly check and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo nents Receiver Module Four TPMS Sensors Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and graph ics displaying tire pressures TPMS Telltale Warning Light TPMS Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrumen
232. control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatu
233. coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 110 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet if equipped converts DC current to AC current and is located on the left rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left passenger seat The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical dev
234. crease in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 490 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to open
235. ct the Rating tab Highlight Change Password and then press the remote control s ENTER button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the password is correct the set password screen is displayed Using the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control s Right cursor button to select digits enter the new password After the four digit password is entered press the remote control s ENTER button to accept the change DVD Player Level Menu 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 To set the rating activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions Using the remote control s Left and Right cursor buttons select the Rating tab Highlight Change Rating and then press the remote control s ENTER button Enter the current password Select a digit use the remote control s Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and then press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits
236. d Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire 528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire and cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle control 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle 5 Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire cover assembly is positioned cor rectly against the underside of the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed specifically to stow a compact spare tire only Do not attempt to use the winch to stow the full size flat tire or any other full size tire Vehicle damage may result 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529 Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel
237. d in Blind Spot Alert Lights CHM mode in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Alert Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Turn Menu Off Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconn
238. d risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other authorized service facility using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C air filter
239. ddition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio is also muted If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 phone using simple voice commands e g Call
240. dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder AHR In Reset Position 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts a
241. ded cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approxi mately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value 474 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been es
242. den stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident Removing Slack From Belt 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system peri
243. djustments Removable from vehicle for additional floor space The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort A one piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz 6 L bottles Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders and a convenient storage tray Console Position 1 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large storage area below Dual Storage Bins Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers Console Position 2 Console Position 3 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost position Again lifting second latch handle at the front of the console allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers To Remove The Premium Floor Console 1 Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the console 2 Lift the rear of the console up several inches centimeters 3 Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console To reinstall the console 1 Po
244. dure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system 534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect t
245. e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate 1 To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly inju
246. e driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 16 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on t
247. e inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 458 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 lb 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 14
248. e Controls 1 Rear Blower 3 Rear Mode 2 Rear Temperature 4 Rear Climate Control Lock 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control The rear mode selection REAR allows the settings to be controlled by the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air and clockwise for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor
249. e Pedal and Push Button to Start Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar chime will sound when vehicle starts moving Low Tire Pressure Service TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitor ing System in Starting And Operating Premium TPM Service Graphic Display 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn Signal On RKE Battery Low LOW WASHER FLUID Oil Change Required Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Park Assist Disabled Service Park Assist System Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In Park Blind Spot System Off This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot System has been turned off Blind Spot System Not Available This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block age electronic interference or other temporary con ditions When this message is displayed both outside rear view icons will be illuminated If electronic inter ference is present the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present Service Blind Spot System This message is dis played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM sys
250. e Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control 2 While looking at Screen 1 or 2 highlight VES DISC by either pressing Up Down Left Right buttons or by re peatedly pressing the MODE button then press ENTER on the Remote Control 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Channel Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen Channel Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen The VES will retain the last setting when turned off Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed touch the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen Select VES DISC Mode On The VES Screen Rear VES Soft key 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 3 Touch the 1 or 2 soft key and then the DISC soft key in the VES column To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the screen NOTE To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for
251. e by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your inst
252. e display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE S
253. e instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units
254. e of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 9 Recirculation Control Button Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 NOTE If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation You can select Recirculation mode again if desired Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
255. e of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward Easy Entry Second Row The second row Stow n Go seats allow easy entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat Raising The Head Restraint Seatback Recliner Lever Seat Tumble And Head Restraint Fold Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 The seat will automatically fold into position for easy entry into the third row WARNING In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched Quad Seats If Equipped Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjuster 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt
256. e sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED Two 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets are located on the lower instrument panel below the open storage bin The driver side power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger side power outlet is connected directly to the battery The driver side power outlet will also operate a
257. e the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 594 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary
258. e tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 4 Maximum Load 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 452 STARTING AND OPERATING compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width
259. e to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 472 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross
260. e vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve hicle Security Alarm Turn Off Flash Lights With RKE Lock If Equipped This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the
261. e will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn with Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Flash Lamps with Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle T
262. eature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or th
263. ebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To call one of the names in the list press the button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on
264. eck verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you c
265. ect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played Media Center 130 RES 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternat
266. ed auto matically if this mode is selected 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC panel located on the instrument panel Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC panel Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off The rear ATC system is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle Rear ATC Control Features 1 Blower Speed 3 Rear Mode 2 Rear Temperature 4 Rear Temperature Lock 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically a
267. eed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are p
268. eeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 448 STARTING AND OPERATING Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes thei
269. ehicle must be reset insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs on each door trim panel 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side sliding door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued Manual Door Lock Sliding Door Lock 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other con
270. elect the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player
271. elected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Flashers with Sliding Door When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate when power or manual sliding doors are in operation signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or entering the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance
272. en turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 10 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in
273. engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in
274. engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 21 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 22 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on
275. ensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causi
276. ent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch When the headlights are turned on pushing the multi function lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights parking lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the eight minute delay WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the multifunction lever Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to select the desired wiper speed NOTE Always remove any buildu
277. eplacement Parts 547 Replacement Tires 469 Reporting Safety Defects 610 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 288 289 307 Restraint Head 168 Restraints Child 84 88 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 536 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 270 Rotation Tires 472 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 100 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 103 Safety Defects Reporting 610 Safety Information Tire 452 Safety Tips 99 Safety Exhaust Gas 51 99 Satellite Radio Antenna 343 Schedule Maintenance 590 Seat Belt Maintenance 574 10 INDEX 629 Seat Belt Reminder 68 Seat Belts 52 100 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 61 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage
278. eps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Remote Lock Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside o
279. equipped 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System If Equipped The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions With the Three Zone Temperature Control system each front seat occupant can independently control the Heat ing Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel When the front control is in any position other than rear the front control operates all the rear functions The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera tion Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the Panel mode When the front unit is in Bi Level mode airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets When the front control is in Floor Defrost or Mix modes airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Left Front Temperature Control Provides left front seat occupant with independent tem
280. er approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HIGH to LOW indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes Second Row Heated Seat Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Manual Front Second Row Seat Adjuster Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Adjuster 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped For models equipped with manual reclining seats the recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and l
281. er downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particular Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wire less headphone Product The warranty is not transfer able 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL How Long Does The Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a nominal charge UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT ING FROM THE USE OF OR ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so
282. er the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat Make sure that the child is upright in the seat 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t help move the child to the center rear seating position and use both the lap and shoulder belt Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some ti
283. erican Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 611 Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at 1
284. ersonality Persnlty Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window S
285. es 1 Yes 2 No 3 Where are you 4 I need more direction 5 L O L 6 Why 7 I love you 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 I am on my way 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13 I ll be late 14 Are you there yet 15 Where are we meeting 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages Press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Primary Altern
286. es Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel The switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights interior lights and the fog lights Headlight Switch With Halo Control 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System off turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O OFF position NOTE The engine must be running before
287. es flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Jack Warning Label 522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of Tires General Information for information about the spare tire its use and operation 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated Jack Locations 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523 Rear jack locations are between a pair of down facing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body and is located 6 in 150 mm from door edge NOTE In some situations the jack may need to be placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the vehicle Rear Jacking Locations Front Jack Locations 524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fal
288. es rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 593 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replac
289. ess Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the lower glove compartment You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob Emergency Key Removal 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE Power window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening the front door will cancel this feature CAUTION If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either Jump Start the vehicle Charge the battery WARNING When leaving the vehicle alwa
290. etermines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check
291. exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 423 This system prevents the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Fuel Economy ECON Mode The Fuel Economy ECON mode can im
292. f the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface Continued CAUTION Continued Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows The screens store in the sill trim panels and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out Sun Screen Retracted 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window
293. f Equipped 211 Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 212 To Activate 213 To Set A Desired Speed 214 To Deactivate 214 To Resume Speed 214 To Vary The Speed Setting 214 To Accelerate For Passing 215 Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 215 Parksense Sensors 216 Parksense Warning Display 216 Parksense Display 217 Enabling Disabling Parksense 220 Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist System 221 Cleaning The Parksense System 221 Parksense System Usage Precautions 221 Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If Equipped 224 Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 226 Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 227 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overhead Consoles 227 Front Overhead Console
294. f a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold driveability increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel 484 STARTING AND OPERATING MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that ga
295. f the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph 8 km h 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency RF noises of the system The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is running Power Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open Close the Power Liftgate If the button is pushed while
296. fic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK 5 Turn OFF the ignition 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521 WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued WARNING Continued If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tir
297. files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longe
298. filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield MOPAR All Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Cooling System WARNING When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser
299. floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield 7 Front Defrost Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor may operate in Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 8 Electronic Rear Window Defrost Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear win dow defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the insid
300. freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and
301. fting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control described below to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to third gear only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu mi
302. g of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
303. g Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror controls are located on the driver side door trim panel 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Driver s side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Power Mirror Controls 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic
304. g Your Instrument Panel for further information When the 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the s
305. g is not available on a BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED Getting Started Screen s located in the overhead console Unfold the overhead LCD screen s by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen s Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position Turn on the VES player if equipped on Dual Screen System by pushing the Power button located on the far left or by pressing the button on the Remote Control When the Video Screen s are open and a DVD is inserted into the VES player the screen s turn s on automatically the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 For Dual Video Screen System Channel 1 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 second row and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 third row Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA input jacks 1 set or 2 depending on vehicle located on the back of the center console or on left side behind the second row seat 1 Video In Yellow 2 Left Audio In White 3 Right Audio In Red 4 AUX 2 Inputs If Equipped 5 Power Outlet 6 Power Inverter 354 UNDERSTANDING YO
306. g the initial stages of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HIGH to LOW indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Rear Heated Seats On some models the second row seats are equipped with heaters There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level aft
307. ght Stop Turn Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 507 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control to select a lower gear range NOTE Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions
308. gine Oil 489 Fuel Requirements 487 488 Maintenance 490 10 INDEX 621 Replacement Parts 490 Starting 490 Flooded Engine Starting 420 Floor Console 261 Fluid Capacities 586 Fluid Leaks 103 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 568 Brake 565 Power Steering 438 Fluids 587 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 587 Fog Light Service 584 Fog Lights 201 286 584 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 172 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 536 Fuel 482 Adding 491 Additives 485 Clean Air
309. h Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed 570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch
310. h headlights or sound horn on LOCK Remote Unlock Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s side or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate This will also turn on the Illuminated Entry system Remote Key Unlock On First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Key Fob With Seven Button RKE Transmitter 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform ing the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these st
311. h may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC
312. h on the end of the lever to the second detent and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate several wipe cycles then turn off 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mist Feature Press the end of the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent and release for a single wiping cycle NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Rear Wiper And Washer Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the rear intermittent wipers To activate the washers rotate the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released and then resume the intermit tent interval NOTE Rear window wipers function in the intermittent wiper speed only Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto matically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to o
313. has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence wi
314. he Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn on 3 After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 se
315. he master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distr
316. he original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity 466 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do
317. he SELECT button will do nothing 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Pre
318. he air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight second interval The Air Bag Wa
319. he back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 5 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears stamped on the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle regis tration and title Vehicle Identification Number 6 INTRODUCTION NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death Stamped VIN Location 1 INTRODUCTION 7 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 12
320. he in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message Press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message Press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messag
321. he locking tab is secure FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 20 Gallons 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level Add 2 9 Qts 2 8 L if equipped with a rear heater 586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans
322. he negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoi
323. he opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then move the shift lever back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelera tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion with out spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle
324. he three deploy positions Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align with the directional arrows on the side rails Set the crossbars into the deployed positions Once the crossbars are set into position tighten the thumb screws completely Deploy Positions Choose Two Of Three Crossbar To Side Rail Installation 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Stowing the Crossbars Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars again taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest Once the crossbars are stowed tighten the thumb screws completely NOTE Load should always be secured to crossbars first with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed Tie loops are intended as supplemen tary tie down points only Do not use ratcheting mecha nisms with the tie loops Tightening Crossbar Rail Tie Loops 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 CAUTION Check deployed crossbars frequently and re tighten thumb screws as necessary To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed The load should be secured and placed on top o
325. hem or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably
326. hen the DISC soft key in the MEDIA column To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the screen NOTE To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO MEDIA hard key on the radio faceplate then touch the DISC tab soft key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft key Rear VES Soft key Select Channel Screen 1 And DISC In The MEDIA Column 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 Viewing a DVD on the Touch Screen radio screen is not available in all states provinces and the vehicle must be stopped and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis sion In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged Touching the screen on a Touch Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func tions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions Play A DVD Using The VES Player If Equipped 1 Insert the DVD with the label facing up The VES player automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD NOTE The VES player has basic DVD control func tion such as Menu Play Pause FF RW and Stop 2 To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen gers ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1 3 To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers ensure th
327. hild Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door NOTE After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock al ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position Child Protection Door Lock 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en gaged even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding side door will operate from the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats press the OFF Master Lock Out Switch lo cated in the front overhead console next to the driver WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward away from the vehicle to disengage the Child P
328. hildren to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening The Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This f
329. his noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid 438 STARTING AND OPERATING If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in
330. hone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz ing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following procedures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode Press and hold the button for five seconds until the session begins or 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat
331. ial TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contr
332. ibution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 20 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the
333. ice Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 72 000 miles 117 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 80 000 miles 130 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever comes first Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 597 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it
334. ice has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON Power Inverter Outlet 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter CUPHOLDERS There are cupholders located throughout the interior All liners are removable for cleaning Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge for easy removal Refer to Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Instrument Panel Cupholders The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out drawer just above the lower storage bin Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features Front Cupholders 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Super Console If Equipped On models equipped with the Super Console there are two cupholders located in the center of the console For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the pull out drawer located in the back of
335. ide of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in un
336. ift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Manual Recline Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front ha
337. ile A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2 Using The Remote Control 1 Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen 2 While looking at the video screen either press Up Down Left Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen Select FM Mode On The VES Screen 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Using The Touch Screen Radio Controls 1 Press the MENU hard key on the radio faceplate 2 Touch the Rear VES soft key to display the Rear VES Controls If a channel list is displayed press the HIDE LIST soft key to display the Rear VES Controls screen 3 To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1 touch the 2 soft key and choose an audio source To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the left screen Rear VES Soft key Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA Column 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Dual Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System VES The Remote Control The Touch Screen Radio If Equipped Play A DVD Using The Touch Screen Radio 1
338. ill occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position not the LOCK or ACC positions The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmission is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following conditions The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL The towing distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539 CAUTION Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km with front wheels on the ground can cause severe damage to the transmission Such dam age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehic
339. ime a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do no
340. ing 583 Time Delay 199 Washers 199 Heated Mirrors 115 Heated Seats 163 Heater 392 Heater Engine Block 422 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 204 10 INDEX 623 Hill Start Assist 449 Hitches Trailer Towing 500 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 231 Hood Release 196 Hook Coat 260 Ignition 13 Key 12 13 Ignition Key Removal 13 Illuminated Entry 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 15 Infant Restraint 85 Information Center Vehicle 300 Inside Rearview Mirror 112 Instrument Cluster
341. ing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone Press the button Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone Press the button Following the beep say Mute off 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa pre
342. ing another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni tors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system
343. ing lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Dimmer Control 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Interior Lighting On Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent extreme top position to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate is opened the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started if one of the following occur A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open Any overhead reading light is left on NOTE The key must be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate Interior Lighting Off Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position extreme bottom The interior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and overhead displays when the parking lights or headlights are on Halo Lights If Equipped Halo lights are s
344. ing the fuel door CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Fuel Filler Cap 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 491 WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL may come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gAS
345. int Head Restraint Release Strap 1 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull release strap marked 2 located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback 4 Pull release strap marked 3 to release the anchors Release Strap 2 Release Strap 3 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 5 Pull release strap marked 4 and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin To Unfold Third Row Seats 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch 2 Pull release strap marked 2 to unlock the recliner Release Strap 4 Stowed Third Row Seat 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pulling strap 4 releases the seatback to return to its full upright position 4 Raise the head restraint to its upright position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Tailgate Mode 1 Pull release strap 3 then pull release strap 4 to rotate the entire seat rearward 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode Plastic Gr
346. ion 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Rear Courtesy Reading Lights If Equipped The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press the lens a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows Rear Overhead Consoles If Equipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions with or without sunroof An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines down on the front foot well area while in courtesy mode for added convenience Reading Lights 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch Refer to Lights Halo Lights If Equipped in Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle for further information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held trans
347. ions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
348. iper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out any residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when
349. is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the trans mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward
350. is mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING In partial ESC mode the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled Therefore enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is re duced 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 447 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should turn off with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at sp
351. is required Consult with your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Control ESC and Hill Start Assist HSA These systems complement the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability dur ing emergency braking maneuvers Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 443 wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the Partial Off mode The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light flashes during acceleration ease
352. is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver
353. ish Spanish or French languages 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone button and Voice Com mand button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
354. ist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE If the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button Re circulation mode should only be used temporarily A LED will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when Recirculation mode is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabl
355. ith rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is approximately three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Separating RKE Transmitter 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard
356. itors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals for the first three minutes the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger d
357. its of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location Tire and Loading Information Placard 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 457 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tir
358. iver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat featur
359. king up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In a
360. l Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has
361. l Door Lock Unlock Motors Liftgate Lock Unlock Motors The heated mirrors lower instrument panel power outlet and removable floor console when in the front position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only service able by an authorized dealer The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver s seat The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581 steering column If you experience temporary or perma nent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do the following Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Totally Inte grated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Lamp 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lamps 578 Front Door C
362. l on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 3 Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 6 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525 CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in
363. lace the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the corresponding openings in the drawer FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery Refer to the appli cable Engine Compartment illustration in this section This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed or embossed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575 CAUTION When installing the Totally Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the following table Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J1 40 Amp Green Power Folding Seat J2 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module J3 30 Amp Pink Rear Door Module J4 25 Amp Natural Dri
364. lant selection 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting on high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy and or humid weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
365. lash and horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE If your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors The park lights will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a Remote Start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the transmitter After the vehicle is unlocked you can enter the vehicle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON RUN position otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in
366. laying on Channel Screen 1 touch the 2 soft key and choose an audio source To exit touch the back arrow soft key at the top left of the screen Rear VES Soft key 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Third Row Swivel Screen If Equipped The third row screen or Screen 2 has the ability to lower and swivel to face forward While the swivel screen is facing forward the second row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order for the swivel screen Screen 2 to work Select Channel Screen 2 And HDD In The MEDIA Column 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and the right side equates to Channel 2 Selecting a video source on Channel 1 the video source will display on the second row screen or Screen 1 and can be heard on Channel 1 Selecting a video source on Channel 2 the video source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2 and can be heard on Channel 2 Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen s are closed Remote Control Controls And Indicators 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on Remote Control
367. le is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available wheel lift towing equip ment may be used Rear towing with the front wheels on the ground is not allowed as transmission damage will occur If rear towing is the only alternative the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Engine Compartment 3 6L 543 Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 544 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 544 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 545 Replacement Parts 547 Dealer Service 547 Maintenance Procedures 547 Engine Oil 548 Engine Oil Filter 550 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 551 Exhaust System 551 Maintenance Free Ba
368. le phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the
369. leased verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 429 REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second third and fourth gears direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions 430 STARTING AND OPERATING When frequent transmission shi
370. lf of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Push Button Active Head Restraint Normal Position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over
371. lize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening
372. ll and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 451 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have th
373. ll continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 9 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on wh
374. ltiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel One Touch Folding Seat Third Row Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 Open to Normal 2 Stow 3 Tailgate Fold Flat 4 Right Left Seats Both Seats 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 NOTE Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting to fold stow the power third row seats To abort seat operation while seat is in motion press a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat Once the seat stops moving then the desired position can be selected The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation When the system detects an obstacle the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle Should this occur remove the obstacle and press the button again for the desired position Manually Folding Third Row Seats If Equipped 1 Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down 2 Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the release strap marked 1 located on the outboard side of the head restra
375. menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail
376. minated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Illuminated Mirror Rear Detection Zones 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
377. mitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery Overhead Compartment Features 1 DVD 1 5 Storage 2 Rear HVAC 6 DVD 1 3 Interior Lights 7 Interior Lights 4 Storage 8 Halo Lighting 1 If equipped otherwise storage 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should
378. mming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre quency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proc
379. mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previ ous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster In List
380. mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device Preset 1 Playlists Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufactur er s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to
381. monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 481 value instead of dashes
382. move for cleaning and or storage The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom modate a second ash receiver if desired Interior Bottle Holder 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 STORAGE Glove Compartments Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Upper Glove Compartment To open the upper compartment press in on the button located on the left side of the upper door The door will automatically open To close the compartment door push downward on the door s surface to latch the door closed Upper and Lower Glove Compartments Upper Compartment 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lower Glove Compartment To open the lower compartment pull out on the release handle NOTE The lower compartment is equipped with a lock that is part of the compartment handle Door Trim Panel Storage Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage Lower Compartment 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped The driver s seatback has a primary storage pocket on all models and an optional secondary mesh pocket Umbrella Holder An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the left front door entry scuff molding Driver s Seatback Storage 1 Bag Holder 2 Standard Pocket 3 Mesh Pocket Umbrella Holder 256 UNDERSTANDING
383. mperature information to Base Cluster use STEP and RESET button on steering wheel to access or reset the display For further informa tion refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer Message Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display door Door Ajar gATE Liftgate Ajar LoW tirE Low Tire Pressure gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoCOOL Low Coolant NOTE Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped for further information 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the STEP button on the steering
384. n damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Surfaces The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids 572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of
385. n to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock ont
386. n the instrument panel 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal Shift Lever Override Access Cover 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537 5 Using a small screwdriver or similar small push and hold the override release lever forward 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable Transmission in NEUTRAL 25 mph 40 km h max speed 15 miles 24 km max distance Wheel lift Rear Front OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed 538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia w
387. n upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE 1 INTRODUCTI
388. nated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 431 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gear normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the shift lever to the
389. nd all passengers 502 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Op erating for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued CAUTION Continued Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a injury collision Fol low these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 503 WARNING Continued Make certain that
390. nd cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 12Y532 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
391. nd cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can inc
392. nd release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed lo
393. ndition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment information or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 463 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs
394. ne of the five intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity If the opera tor desires more wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 4 or 5 If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1 Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON and the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature
395. nerates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners can not protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of t
396. ng the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in the EVIC On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 WARNING Continued Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System it
397. nition switch Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts 13 Amps Do not exceed 160 Watts 13 Amps for each of these outlets The power outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The power outlet located on the lower instrument panel is powered directly from the battery Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting Power Outlet Fuses 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat Opt or with Console Rear 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Front 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or with Console Center 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued CAUTION Continued Accessories that draw higher power i e
398. njury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever As a security measure your vehicle may be built with a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow in the dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle Cargo Area Storage The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement Load To This Line This line indicates how far
399. nless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend ov
400. nu Off Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel UP Button Press and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units System Setup and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus SELECT Button The SELECT button allows access to informa tion in EVIC submenus selects some feature settings and resets some EVIC features The EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Key in ignition Ignition or Accessory On Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted L Gate ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote start active Key to Run Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Vehicle Not in Park Press Brak
401. nwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued 428 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result Continued CAUTION Continued DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal re
402. o make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Intermittent Wiper Options If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When the system is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Key Off Power Delay When this feature is s
403. o screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on press 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones Disc Formats The VES DVD player is capable of playing the follow ing types of discs 12 mm or 8 mm diameter DVD Video discs MPEG 2 video compression see notes about DVD Region Codes DVD Audio discs 2 channel audio output only Audio Compact Discs CDs CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files Video CDs MPEG 1 video compression DVD Region Codes The VES DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will not play and will be ejected DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the VES DVD player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down
404. o this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 touch screen radio iPod USB MP3 control feature refer to the separate RBZ RHB RHR RHP RHW or RB2 User s Manual iPod USB MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the
405. occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 598 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 104 000 miles 169 000 km Flush and replace the engine coolant at 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 112 00
406. ocery Bag Retainer Hooks Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be programmed to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE transmitters Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 is pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s side view mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust
407. odically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assem blies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a click 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck When the belt is long enough to fit insert the large latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click The retractor should withdraw any slack in the belt To release the small latch plate position the end of the large latch plate against the red button on the small latch plate and push upward Reinstall the latch plates into the headliner Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage To move the an chorage downward squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem bly As a guide
408. oes not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE Crossbars are error proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions To help control wind noise stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Deploying the Crossbars To deploy the crossbars completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side CAUTION Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle Bend the crossbar supports at each end taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint Slide the thumb screw down Loosening Crossbars 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Then position the crossbars across the roof Stowed Position Deployed Position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 NOTE The crossbars are identical and can be placed in any two of t
409. of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 453 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E F G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall s
410. off Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE When both switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 1 1 Volume Control 2 Power Button 3 Channel Selection Switch 4 Power Indicator 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 When both switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES Channel 2 2 Press the MODE button on the remote control 3 If the video screen is displaying a video source such as a DVD Video pressing STATUS shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next mode When the mode is in an audio only source such as FM the Mode Selection menu appears on screen 4 When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode 5 To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu press the BACK button on the remote control Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cov
411. ogramming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small c
412. on Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information 496 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weigh
413. on on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continu ing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter A chime will sound signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been successfully disabled To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either Memory Position repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter
414. ons and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued WARNING Continued Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 470 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Use chains on P225 65R16 and P235 60R16 tires only P225 65R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
415. oor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Mirrors 112 Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 112 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 113 Outside Mirrors
416. oor open Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
417. or under front super console forward bin liner To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the spare tire you will need to refer to one of the following center console configurations Spare Tire Location 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515 Super Console For vehicles equipped with the Super Console the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console 1 Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor console Super Console 1 Lower Drawer 2 Front Drawer 3 Front Drawer Liner Lower Drawer 516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Open the front drawer to expose the storage compart ment 3 Remove the liner from the console s storage compart ment to access the spare tire winch drive nut Premium Base Cargo Center Console Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug if equipped to access the winch drive nut Spare Tire Tools The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a spare tire hook to remove the compact Drive Nut Access Winch Cover Assembly Plug If Equipped 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517 spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T handle to raise lower the compact spare tire cover assembly Assembled T handle A Spare Tire Hook T handle B Extension 1 C Extension 2 Assembling The Spare Tire Hook A Spare Tire Hook T handle B Extension 1 C Extension 2 5
418. osition provided it meets sufficient resistance If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or close position it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed To close the door wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop the power sliding door motor will make a clicking sound until the door has no further move ment This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside or outside handle If this condition occurs no damage is done to the power sliding door motor The power sliding door must be opened or closed manually WARNING You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened This will alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch from ON RUN to OFF five times ending in the ON RUN position do not start the engine 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the
419. ositions Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 The right hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or to CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch op eration in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The but
420. ot shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 WARNING Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and t
421. ourtesy Lamp 578 Front Header Reading Lamps If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74 Liftgate Lamp s 578 Overhead Console Reading Lamps PC579 Removable Console Lamp If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Headlamp H11 Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front Side Marker Park Turn Signal 3757A or PY27 7W Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Backup Lamp 3157 License 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing 2 Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector then depress the tab and remove the connector from the
422. p of snow that pre vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Washer And Wiper Controls 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wiper washer control lever to one of the first five detents to select the desired delay interval NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 second between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fifth detent Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed operation Windshield Washers To use the Washer pus
423. pact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair t
424. personal injury NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 102 ft lbs 138 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 9 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Mounting Spare Tire 526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 10 Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire location Have the full sized tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 11 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times NOTE Refer to the Spare Tire Tools section for instructions on assembling the T handle 1
425. placement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm mon
426. prevailing road condi tions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Continued WARNING Continued The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC The Electronic Stability Control ESC enhances direc tional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 445 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
427. prove the vehi cle s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi tions Press the econ switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECON mode is engaged Fuel Economy Mode Switch 424 STARTING AND OPERATING When the Fuel Economy ECON Mode is engaged the vehicle control systems will change the following The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to allow the engine to operate at lower speeds The torque converter clutch will engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer The engine idle speed will be lower The overall driving performance will be more conser vative Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors Six Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 425 The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a norm
428. ps on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Installing The Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be e
429. quipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system In general you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchor ages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Each vehicle except commercial cargo vehicles is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second row seats and in the center position on all third row fold in floor seats Second row seats also feature tether strap
430. r to load than non multisession discs Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and uti
431. r Anchor Child Restraint 89 Tilt Steering Column 209 Tire and Loading Information Placard 457 10 INDEX 631 Tire Identification Number TIN 455 Tire Markings 452 Tire Safety Information 452 Tires 103 461 613 Aging Life of Tires 468 Air Pressure 461 Chains 470 Changing 513 Compact Spare 465 General Information 461 High Speed 463 Inflation Pressures 462 Jacking 513 521 Life of Tires 468 Load Capacity 457 458 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 473 Pressure Warning Light 289 Quality Grading 613 Radial 464 Replacement
432. r foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Ins
433. r it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 495 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combinati
434. r passengers Super Console 1 Front Sliding Tambour Door 2 Cupholder Light Ring 3 Rear Sliding Tambour Door Rear Drawer Storage 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side of the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle is either running or the key is in the accessory position Press in on the flashlight to release it To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high twice for low and a third time to return to off Press And Release 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear win do
435. radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal
436. radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side
437. rature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera ture The rear temperature settings are displayed in the front ATC panel When rear controls are locked by the front system the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coo
438. re are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child The forward facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and more than one year old A convertible child seat one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rearward facing infant seat may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMER CIAL CARGO VEHICLE When a convertible seat is properly installed facing forward the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Children more than 40 lbs 18 kg should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm Tether Installation For Commercial Cargo Vehicles To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle follow the instructions shown 1 Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 2 Follow the child restraint manufac
439. re located on the rear leg assemblies near the floor To remove the seat squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers To reinstall the seat align the seat into the detent posi tions on the floor Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle WARNING If not properly latched the bench seats could become loose Personal injuries could result After reinstall ing these seats be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles Release Handles 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Third Row Power Recline If Equipped The power recline feature located on the side of the seat cushion adjusts the seatback angle forward rearward for occupant comfort Third Row Power Folding Seat If Equipped A one touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank NOTE Lower the head restraint by pulling on the release strap marked 1 located on the outboard side of the head restraint Third Row Power Seat Switch Head Restraint Release Strap 1 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK The rear switch bank allows mu
440. rease the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switc
441. red or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLES NO FACTORY INSTALLED REAR SEATS IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat However if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age size and weight WARNING NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats In an accident serious injury or death may occur from the deploying pas senger airbag Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat Use this tether anchor to secure only forward facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap WARNING Rearward facing infant restraints must never be se cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rearward facing infant restraints Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles The
442. res especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on Power Lumbar Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Front Heated Seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located on the switch bank below the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level durin
443. rning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts wer e buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
444. rning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES Replacing The Remote Control Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so for themselves If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned
445. rogramming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes
446. rompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobi
447. rotection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door if equipped 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 NOTE After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK regardless of the child lock lever position LIFTGATE On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the liftgate press the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Liftgate Handle Location 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate When the liftgate is fully open pressing the
448. ru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in th
449. s To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information Stow n Go Seating If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage Second Row Stow n Go On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seats the seats will fold and tumble in one motion 1 Move the front seat fully forward 2 Recline the front seatback fully forward 3 Raise the armrests on the second row seat NOTE Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the armrests are raised 4 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the LOCK position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Storage Bin Cover Lock Release 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat The non adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold automatically during the seat tumble No additional actuation is necessary Seatback Recliner Lever Seat Tumble And Head Restraint Fold Lever Non Adjustable Head Restraint 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy storage 6 Push the seat into the storage bin Automatic Folding Seatback Tumbled Second Row Seat 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 Close the storage bin cover CAUTION The storage bin cover must be locked and
450. s and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone mus
451. s reached This shut down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player Display Other Language Setup DVD Player Language Menu 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL All of the Language settings have a special Other setting to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng lish These languages are selected using a special four digit code To enter a new language code activate the DVD Setup Menu To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD enter radio disc mode then DVD setup and follow these additional instructions Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons highlight the Language item you want to edit and then press the remote control ENTER button Using the remote control Down cursor button select the Other setting then press the remote control s Right cursor button to begin editing the setting Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but tons select a digit for the current position After selecting the digit press the remote control s Right cursor button to select the next digit Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits When the entire four digit code is entered press the remote control s ENTER button If the language code is not valid the numbers all change back to If the digits are visible after this step then the language code is valid Here is an abbreviated list of language codes For more language codes please contact the dealer where the
452. s sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Display 480 STARTING AND OPERATING is present In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS Therefore the TPMS will not
453. s should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that
454. s use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow fl
455. se collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 461 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted and the tires inspected
456. se the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR If Equipped These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any
457. se to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Fast Tone Continuous Tone 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance in cm Greater than 79 in 200 cm 79 39 in 200 100 cm 39 25 in 100 65 cm 25 12 in 65 30 cm Less than 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert Chime None Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Fast Continuous Display Message Park Assist System ON Warning Object Detected Warning Object Detected Warning Object Detected Warning Object Detected Arcs None 3 Solid Continuous 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When ParkSense is disabled the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understandin
458. sibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a layer of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you
459. sition the console at a slight angle rear slightly higher than the front 2 Slide the console forward into the floor bracket 3 Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket 4 Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket Console Position 4 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Super Console If Equipped The Super Console contains multiple storage areas front lower pass through top forward bin top rearward bin and rear pull out drawer The super console contains a pass through storage area accessible for both the driver and front passenger The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing down on the finger tabs and sliding the door The front tambour door slides forward the rear tambour door slides rearward Front Lower Pass Through 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The front cupholder light ring and pass through lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Located in the back of the super console is a storage drawer and cupholders for the rea
460. sliding door window by a single switch on the door handle assembly The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay NOTE The switches will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The sliding door windows do not fully open stopping several inches above the window sill Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back Rocking the handle back wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines Always open the door smoothly Sliding Door Power Window Switch
461. slow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Progra
462. soline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 485 CAUTION Continued An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Mos
463. splay shows the current Mode selection Panel Bi Level Floor Mix 4 Blower Control Display This display shows the current Blower speed selection 5 Front Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode 6 Auto Indicator This indicates when the system is in Auto mode 7 Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant 8 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected 9 Passenger Temperature Control Up Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings 10 Rear Control Button Provides toggle operation between front control screen and rear control screen Push the button to activate the rear climate control screen and allow the front seat occupants control over the rear climate settings 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 11 Rear Lock Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls 12 Auto Temperature Control Button Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to selec
464. ss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view
465. ss the button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the button to begin 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the p
466. ss the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button Compass Variance Map 4 UNDERSTANDIN
467. suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued CAUTION Continued Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 471 SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failur
468. switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will f
469. t Refer to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 13 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF 14 Blower Control There are seven blower speeds the blower speed in creases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 15 Mode Control Button Press and release to select between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 16 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 17 SYNC Button Press and release to control the temperature setting for all three zones from the driver temperature control 18 Driver Temperature Control Up Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front ATC Panel The Three Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel To change the rear system settings 1 Press REAR button to change control to rear control mode Rear display below will appear Control func tions now operate rear
470. t be turned on paired to the Uconnect System and have network coverage Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system
471. t carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This type of hitch is the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 497 Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer s axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with an authorized hitch and trailer manufact
472. t cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a 478 STARTING AND OPERATING LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text Low Tire Pressure Display 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 479 message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which TPMS Sensor s is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled thi
473. t of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 486 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible F
474. t the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 128 000 miles 208 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 600 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 136 000 miles 221 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 144 000 miles 234 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the
475. t use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The RES Media Center is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this
476. tablished for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 475 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the
477. tal Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy
478. ted in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Blower Control 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfort able while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog m
479. tem is permanently unavailable The driver will receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated If this message is present see an authorized dealer 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include Electronic Range Select ERS Status The shift lever status 5 4 3 2 1 are displayed indicating the shift lever position Telltales 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further informa tion on ERS refer to Starting And Operating Electronic Speed Control Ready This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ready For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added Loose Gascap Indicator If the vehicle diagnostic system d
480. terioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The six speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and has no dipstick See your authorized dealer to have the transmission fluid checked or serviced Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed 568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and
481. the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Continued 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the left side of the steering column Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF
482. the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 12 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 13 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 14 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 15 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on whil
483. the Super Console Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cupholders Super Console Cupholders Rear Cupholders 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Premium Console Cupholders If Equipped On models equipped with premium center consoles there are four cupholders located on the top of the console Interior Bottle Holders There are four bottle holders located in the interior One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim panels and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel Each holder accommo dates up to a 20 oz 6 L plastic bottle WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury Premium Console Cupholders 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes toys games or MP3 players etc Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped With the optional authorized dealer installed Smoker s Package Kit a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel To install the ash receiver align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure Pull upward on the ash receiver to re
484. the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Shared Modes This allows the VES to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES sources to the vehicle speakers When the radio and VES channel 1 or 2 are in the same shared mode a VES icon will be visible on the radio s display for that channel and the shared icon will be visible on the VES screen When in shared mode the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2 If the radio functions FM AM or SAT are in the shared
485. the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To get into the BTSA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played Selecting Different Audio Device 1 Press PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone Browse Browsin
486. the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed
487. the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead console If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is armed using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Power Open Close Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Left Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Ve hicle Security Alarm Power Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Right Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If th
488. the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio When listening to compressed audio on a data disc PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory When listening to a 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 disc in a radio with a multiple disc changer PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ ous disc 11 MUTE Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel 12 SLOW Press to slow playback of a DVD disc Press play to resume normal play 13 STATUS Press to display the current status 14 MODE Press to change the mode of the selected channel See the Mode Selection section of this manual for details on changing modes 15 SETUP When in a video mode press the SETUP button to access the display settings see the display settings section to access the DVD setup menu select the menu button on the radio When a disc is loaded in the DVD player if equipped and the VES mode is selected and the disc is stopped press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual 16 BACK When navigating in menu mode press to return to the previous screen When navigating a DVDs disc menu the operation depends on the disc s contents 17 In radio modes press to seek to the previous tunable station In disc modes press and hold to fast rewind through
489. the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always
490. ther information If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature Lights On Reminder If the headlights or the parking lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant lights on condi tion until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn off Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob Pressing the head light switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off Dimmer Controls The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch With the park
491. to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind t
492. to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 kg 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 505 CAUTI
493. ton in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if
494. trategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night The Halo control switch is located to the right of the dimmer switch 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To activate the Halo lights rotate the Halo switch control upward or downward to in crease or decrease the lighting Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column The multifunction lever controls the Turn Signals Halo Control Multifunction Lever 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Headlight Beams Low High Flash To Pass Optical Horn Front and Rear Wipers Washer Functions Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h for about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert the driver Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the det
495. trols or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to Driver Power Door Lock Switches 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open the sliding door will lock Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened This will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven the shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed
496. trument Panel for further informa tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis abled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hi
497. truments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders Removal Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting at one edge to ease removal Cleaning The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe or you may follow the cleaning procedure below Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately 30 minutes After 30 minutes pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth 574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Installation P
498. ts can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and Recirculation mode buttons at the same time Rear Manual Climate Control If Equipped The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an off position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle Rear Manual Climat
499. ttery 553 Air Conditioner Maintenance 555 Body Lubrication 557 Windshield Wiper Blades 558 Cooling System 559 Brakes 565 7 Automatic Transmission 567 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion 569 Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders 574 Fuses 575 Totally Integrated Power Module 575 Vehicle Storage 582 Replacement Bulbs 582 Bulb Replacement 583 Headlamps 583 Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 584 Fog Lamps 584 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Backup Lamps 584 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 585 License Lamp 586 Fluid Capacities
500. turer s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap 3 Route the tether strap under the head rest NOTE Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered between the headrest supports underneath the head rest 4 Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 5 Following the child seat manufacturer s instructions tighten the child restraint tether strap 6 Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Contact your authorized deal ership for a replacement part 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with a child restraint only It should not be used for any other purpose Before use inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE that strap Personal injury may result Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement part ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during
501. uel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E 85 Fuel Cap 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 487 CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided E 85 Badge 488 STARTING AND OPERATING When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
502. ulb straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker and Backup Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two screws from the inboard side Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the two ball studs NOTE If a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint The PRY location is best closest to the studs while dislodging them separately 3 Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly See your authorized dealer 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585 License Lamp The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light bar and above the license plate 1 Using a small screwdriver press inward the locking tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal 2 Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly and pull the bulb out to remove 3 Push the bulb into the socket twist the socket into the lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring t
503. up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESC or TCS WARNING The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Brake Assist System BAS The Brake Assist System BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency brak ing maneuvers The system detects an emergency brak ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the 444 STARTING AND OPERATING brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by
504. urer or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 499 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 lbs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 500 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 6L Automatic 8 750 lbs 3 969 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Up to 2 persons amp Luggage 3 600 lbs 1 633 kg 360 lbs 163 kg 8 750 lbs 3 969 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 to
505. urn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 427 WARNING Continued It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key fob Once the key fob is removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against u
506. ve the console 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console 1 Position the console at a slight angle front slightly higher than the rear 2 Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket hook 3 Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole is centered on the winch hole 4 Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down ward on the console with slight pressure reinstall the cover plug 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Premium Console If Equipped The three compartment console with sliding storage bin sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage bin offers multiple configurations Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean ing The cupholders can accept plastic bottles large cups or mugs with handles Top tray storage Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs or other items 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics Rear occupant accessible Multiple a
507. vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 437 system T
508. vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC Off switch is located in the center switch bank next to the hazard flasher switch 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ESC On This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in the Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated When in the Partial Off mode ESC will operate without engine torque management Th
509. vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal Emergency Key Removal Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 3 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it w
510. ver Door Node J5 25 Amp Natural Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes Pump Stability Control System J7 30 Amp Pink Antilock Brakes Valve Stability Control System 576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J8 40 Amp Green Power Memory Seat If Equipped J9 40 Amp Green Partial Zero Emis sions Vehicle Motor Flex Fuel If Equipped J10 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Wash Manifold Tuning Valve If Equipped J11 30 Amp Pink Power Sliding Door Module Anti Theft Module If Equipped J12 30 Amp Pink HVAC Rear Blower Radiator Fan Motor J13 60 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw IOD Main Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J14 40 Amp Green Rear Window Defogger J15 40 Amp Green Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper LO HI J21 20 Amp Blue Front Rear Washer J22 25 Amp Natural Sunroof Module 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M1 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp Brake Switch M2 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Lighting Front Fog Lamps Intelli gent Battery Sensor IBS M3 20 Amp Yellow Front Rear Axle Locker Vacuum Pump Motor M4
511. voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Enable Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information Auto Unlock Doors When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Dr
512. w defroster only when the engine is operating Three Press Switch 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window REAR LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails If adding cargo deploy the crossbars Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars to maximum of 150 lbs 68 kg The roof rack d
513. wheel to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni tion Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator mess
514. while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 23 Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 24 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the tempera ture gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off
515. with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to A C Air Filter Replacement 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield W
516. work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering t
517. y as possible The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by chang ing the front blower knob setting Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally There are seven fixed blower speeds Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counter clockwise The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circula
518. y pressing the accelerator 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and pos
519. ys remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked
520. ystem It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this ch

2012 Dodge Grand Caravan Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents